1

SAIL AND SPAR MEASUREMENTTHEORY

2

WELCOMEfrom

Australian Sailing

Your instructor is

Barry Johnson IM

Please introduce yourself by giving us your name background and what you are expecting from this clinic

Sails and Spars Measurement Presentation 180913

Main Objectivesbull Educate Sail and Spar measurers as to their roles according to

the Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS)

Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS) httpwwwsailingorgtoolsdocumentsERS20172020UpdatedPrintVersion-[20912]pdf3

2

WELCOMEfrom

Australian Sailing

Your instructor is

Barry Johnson IM

Please introduce yourself by giving us your name background and what you are expecting from this clinic

Sails and Spars Measurement Presentation 180913

Main Objectivesbull Educate Sail and Spar measurers as to their roles according to

the Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS)

Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS) httpwwwsailingorgtoolsdocumentsERS20172020UpdatedPrintVersion-[20912]pdf3

Main Objectivesbull Educate Sail and Spar measurers as to their roles according to

the Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS)

Equipment Rules of Sailing (ERS) httpwwwsailingorgtoolsdocumentsERS20172020UpdatedPrintVersion-[20912]pdf3

ldquoMeasurementrdquo

bull ldquoMeasurementrdquo of equipment at sailing events to check use of equipment and verify that ldquocertifiedrdquo equipment is still in compliance with the ldquorulesrdquo during a race is called ldquoevent measurementrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectionrdquo

4

ldquoMeasurersrdquo

bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee

5

6

Clinic Outline

Basic Principals

Useful ERS information

Measurement tools

Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement

7

WHAT IS THE ERS

The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts

bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)

bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations

bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)

bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment

8

Terminology

A term used in its defined sense is printed

bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS

Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English

APPLICABILITY

The ERS may be made applicable by

(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races

The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing

9

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

ldquoMeasurersrdquo

bull ldquo Measurersrdquo who perform event measurement are called ldquoevent measurersrdquo or ldquoequipment inspectorsrdquo They work for the Race Committee

5

6

Clinic Outline

Basic Principals

Useful ERS information

Measurement tools

Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement

7

WHAT IS THE ERS

The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts

bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)

bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations

bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)

bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment

8

Terminology

A term used in its defined sense is printed

bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS

Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English

APPLICABILITY

The ERS may be made applicable by

(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races

The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing

9

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

6

Clinic Outline

Basic Principals

Useful ERS information

Measurement tools

Practical Session ndash Sail and Spar Measurement

7

WHAT IS THE ERS

The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts

bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)

bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations

bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)

bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment

8

Terminology

A term used in its defined sense is printed

bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS

Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English

APPLICABILITY

The ERS may be made applicable by

(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races

The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing

9

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

7

WHAT IS THE ERS

The Equipment Rules of Sailing consists of three parts

bull Part 1 ndash Use of Equipment(Section A ndash During an Event amp Section B ndash While Racing)

bull Part 2 ndash Equipment definitions (Sections C through G) Definitions of equipment and measurements for use in class rules and other rules and regulations

bull Part 3 ndash Rules governing equipment control equipment certification and inspection (Section H)

bull Appendix 1 - Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment

8

Terminology

A term used in its defined sense is printed

bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS

Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English

APPLICABILITY

The ERS may be made applicable by

(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races

The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing

9

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

8

Terminology

A term used in its defined sense is printed

bull in ldquoboldrdquo type if defined in the ERS and bull in ldquoitalicrdquo type if defined in the RRS

Other words and terms are used in the sense ordinarily understood in nautical or general use in English

APPLICABILITY

The ERS may be made applicable by

(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races

The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing

9

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

APPLICABILITY

The ERS may be made applicable by

(a) Class Rules(b) Adoption in the notice of race and sailing instructions(c ) Prescriptions of an MNA for racing under its jurisdiction(d) WS Regulations(e) Other documents that govern the races

The ERS are Revised and Published every 4 years by World Sailing

9

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

10

Changes

The ERS may only be changed as follows

(a) Prescriptions of an MNA may change a rule in ERS Part 1 for races under its jurisdiction

(b) Class rules may change ERS rules as permitted by rule A1

Not applicable to develop or test proposed rules in local races MNA approval may be required for such changes

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

11

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Closed Class Rules C22

Class rules where anything not specifically permitted by the class rules is prohibited

bull Open Class Rules C23

Class rules where anything not specifically prohibited by the class rules is permitted

bull Class Rules Authority C24

The Body which gives final approval to class rule class rule changes and class rule interpretations

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

12

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Limit Mark C48A clearly visible mark of a single color contrasting to the part(s) on which it is placedindicating a measurement point

bull Event Limitation Mark C49A mark placed by a race committee on equipment whose replacement at the event is controlled by the class rules

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

13

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Official Measurer C44

A person appointed or recognized by the MNA of the country where the control takes place to carry out certification control and when the class rules permit certification

bull Equipment Inspector C46

A person appointed by a race committee to carry out equipment inspection

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

14

ERS Section C General Definitions

bull Boat C61

The equipment used by the crew to take part in a race

It includes

bull Hull(s) and any connecting structure(s)

bull Hull appendage(s)

bull Ballast and boat corrector weights

bull Rig

bull Sail(s)

bull fittingsbull all other items of sports equipment used excluding consumables

personal amp portable equipment (C65)

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

15

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

F11 RIGThe spars spreaders rigging fittings and any corrector weights

F13 Spar The main structural part(s) of the rig to or from which sails are attached andor supported

F14 Spar Types

(a) MASTA spar on which the head or throat of a sail or a yard is set Includes its standing rigging running rigging spreaders fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging and fittings that are not essential to the function of the mast as part of the rig

(b) BOOMA spar attached at one end to a mast spar or a hull and on which the clew of a sail is set and on which the tack andor foot of the sail may be set Includes its rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging running rigging blocks andor any kicking strapstrut arrangement

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

16

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

(c) HULL SPARSA spar attached to the hull

BOWSPRITA hull spar extending forward to attach rigging andor the tack of a headsail or headsails

(d) OTHER SPARSOther spar types include their rigging fittings and any corrector weights but not running rigging

SPINNAKER POLEA spar attached to the mast spar to set a spinnaker

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

17

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Spreader F15Equipment used to brace a spar attached at one end to the spar and the end to rigging and working in compression when in use

Rigging F16Any equipment attached at one or both ends to spars sails or other rigging and capable of working in tension only Includes associated fittings which are not permanently fixed to a hull spar or spreader

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

18

ERS Section F Rig Definitions

Rigging Types F17

(a) Standing Rigging Rigging used to support a mast spar or hull spar It may be adjustable (i) Shroud (ii) Stay (iii) Forestay)

(b) Running RiggingRigging primarily used to trim a spar andor a sail (i) Halyard (ii) Backstay (iii) Running Backstay (iv) Checkstay (v) Outhaul (vi) Sheet (vii) Spinnaker Guy

(c) OTHER RIGGING(i) TRAPEZERigging attached to a mast spar used to support a single crew member

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

19

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F22 MAST LIMIT MARKS(a) LOWER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a boom spar or sail

(b) UPPER LIMIT MARKThe limit mark for the setting of a sail

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

20

F23 (p) MAST TIP WEIGHTThe weight of the mast measured at the upper point when the spar is supported at the lower point H46 Any halyards shall be fully hoisted and rigging tied to the spar at the lower limit mark with lower ends hanging free or resting on the ground

F23 (n) MAST SPAR WEIGHTThe weight of the spar including fittings and corrector weights

F23 (o) MAST WEIGHTThe weight of the mast

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

21

F23 (q) MAST CENTRE OF GRAVITY HEIGHTThe distance from the mast datum point to the centre of gravity of the mast

H47 Mast centre of gravity height shall be checked with any halyards fully hoisted and rigging pulled taut and tied to the spar as close to the lower point as possible

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

22

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (k) MAST SPAR CURVATURE (to check straightness)The greatest distance between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to thelower point taken at 90deg to the straight linewhen the spar is resting on one side

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

23

ERS Section F Mast Measurement Definitions

F23 (l) MAST SPAR DEFLECTION (to check stiffness)The difference in distance at a specified distance from the mast datum point between the spar and a straight line from the upper point to the lower pointtaken at 90deg to the straight line with and without a specified load at the specified distance when the spar is horizontal at and supported at these points

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

24

ERS Section F Boom Measurement Definitions

F3

F31 (a) OUTER POINT

F32 (a) OUTER LIMIT MARK

F33 (a) OUTER POINT DISTANCE

F33 (b) SPAR CURVATURE

F33 (c) SPAR DEFLECTION

F33 (d) CROSS SECTION

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

25

ERS Section F F4 Poles amp F5 Bowsprits

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

26

ERS Section G Trilateral Sail Definitions

G11 SAILAn item of equipment used to propel the boat including any of the following added parts when they are present

bullsail reinforcementsbullbatten pocketsbullwindowsbullstiffeningbullTablingbullsail edge ropes and wiresbullattachmentsbullother parts as permitted by class rules

G14 (a) BODY OF THE SAILThe sail excluding the areas where parts are added as per G11

G14 (b) PLYA sheet of sail material which may be made up of a number of layers

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

27

G14 (d) Woven Ply

bull A ply which when torn can be separated into fibres without leaving evidence of a film

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

28

G14 (e) Laminated Ply

A ply made up of more than one layer

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

29

G14 (c) Soft Sail

bull A sail where the body of the sail is capable of being folded flat in any direction without damaging any ply other than by creasing

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

30

G14 (f) SINGLE-PLY SAIL

A sail except at the seams where all parts of the body of the sail consist of only one ply

DO NOT CONFUSE WITH SINGLE-LAYER SAIL MATERIAL

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

31

ERS Section G More Sail Definitions

SEAM ATTACHMENTS

DART CRINGLES STRAPS HANKS SLIDES

TUCK ADJUSTMENT EYES POINTS

BATTEN POCKET REEFING EYES POINTS

STIFFENING BLOCKS amp THEIR FASTENINGS

SAIL OPENING

WINDOW

BOLT ROPES amp THEIR TABLINGS AND LUFF WIRES ARE NOTldquoATTACHMENTSrdquo IN THE 2013-2016 ERS

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

SAIL EDGES amp CORNERS

32

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

33

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

SAIL CORNER MEASUREMENT POINTS

34

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

35

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

36

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

37

QUADRILATERAL SAILS MEASUREMENT POINTS

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

38

Sail Reinforcement

G61 Primary ReinforcementAn unrestricted number of additional permitted ply of permitted materialat a cornerat a adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to theleechat a sail recovery pointwhere permitted by the class rules

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

39

Sail ReinforcementG62 Secondary ReinforcementNot more than two additional layers of ply of permitted material each not thicker than the maximum thickness of the ply of the body of the sail

at a cornerat an adjustment pointat a reefing point adjacent to theluffat a reefing point adjacent to the leechat a sail recovery pointto form a flutter patchto form a chafing patchto form a batten pocket patchwhere permitted by the class rules

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

40

G63 TablingAdditional ply andor folded ply overlap(s) at a sail edge

G64 Batten Pocket PatchSecondary reinforcement at an end of a batten pocket

G65 Chafing PatchSecondary reinforcement where a sail can touch a spreader stanchion shroud or spinnaker pole

G66 Flutter PatchSecondary reinforcement on the leech or the foot at the end of a seam

Sail Reinforcement

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

41

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

PRIMARY SAIL DIMENSIONS

42

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

43

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

44

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

45

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

46

QUADRILATERAL SAILS PRIMARY DIMENSIONS

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

OTHER SAIL DIMENSIONS

47

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

48

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

49

Reinforcement SizeAT A CORNER The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement from a sail corner measurement point

TABLING WIDTH The width of a tabling measured at 90deg to the sail edge

ELSEWHERE The greatest dimension of the sail reinforcement

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

50

WINDOWG14 (m) WINDOWA predominantly transparent ply in the body of the sail

G89 Window Ply AreaThe area of the window ply

G810 Window AreaThe window ply area excluding seams

Window Ply Area

Window Area

Window Area and Window Ply Area

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

51

ERS Section A During an EventUse of Equipment

bull A1 CLASS RULES

Class rules may change ERS rules B1 (POSITION OF EQUIPMENT) and B2 (HEADSAIL BOOM)

bull ERS Appendix 1 Racing Rules that govern the use of equipment for example bull Compliance with a Certificate amp Equipment Inspection see RRS 78

bull Identification on Sails see RRS 77 and Appendix G

bull Advertising Code see Regulation 20

bull Skin Friction see RRS 53

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

52

ERS Section B While Racing

B1 POSITION OF EQUIPMENT

B11 Mast Upper Limit MarkThe mainsail shall be below the mast upper limit mark

B12 Mast Lower Limit MarkWhen a sail is set on a main boom foremast boom or mizzen boom the extension of the upper edge of the spar shall intersect the mast spar above the mast lower limit mark with the boom spar on the mast spar centreplaneand at 90deg to the mast spar

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

53

ERS Section B While RacingB13 Boom Outer Limit Markthe leech of any sail set on a boom extended as necessary shall intersect the upper edge of the boom spar forward of the boom outer limit mark

B14 Bowsprit Outer Limit MarkThe tack of any headsail set on a bowsprit shall be attached aft of thebowsprit outer limit mark

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

54

ERS Section B While RacingB15 Bowsprit Inner Limit MarkThe bowsprit inner limit mark shall not be outboard the hull when the bowsprit is set

B2 HEADSAIL BOOMSThe fore end of a headsail boom shall be approximately on the boat centerplane

ONLY ERS RULES B1 AND B2 MAY BE CHANGED BY CLASS

RULES

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

55

H2 EQUIPMENT INSPECTION

H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the applicationof or compliance with the class rules the question should bereferred to the authority responsible for interpreting the classrules

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

56

H4 RIG MEASUREMENTbull Measurements in the length direction shall be taken along the spar at

the side relevant for the measurement

bull Fittings local curvature and local cut away shall be ignored whenmeasuring a spar or dimensions taken to a spar

bull No external pressure shall be applied to a spar when measuring unlessspecifically prescribed

H7 WEIGHT MEASUREMENT

bull The boat shall be dry and in compliance with the class rules

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

57

H5 SAIL MEASUREMENTH51 Condition of the Sail

For measurement the sail shall

a) be dryb) not be attached to spars or riggingc) unless the class rules prescribe

otherwise have all battens removedd) have pockets of any type flattened

oute) have just sufficient tension applied to

remove wrinkles across the line of the measurement being taken

f) have only one measurement taken at a time and

g) be weighed with all attachments

Attachments at a sail edge other than a bolt rope and tabling shall be excluded when measuring

H52 Hollows in Sail LeechesWhere there is a sail leech hollow and a measurement point falls in the hollowbull between adjacent batten pocketsbull between the aft head point and

adjacent batten pocketbull between the clew point and adjacent

batten pocketbull at an attachment

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

58

Tools amp Equipment

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

Permanent Markers ndash Various coloursPens (for note taking)

Soft Lead pencils with eraserSelection of tapes rulers squares

Steel tapes Minimum Class II standard (End and temperature errors)

59

Basic Toolkit

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

60

Steel rulers Donrsquot use articulated ones unless certified

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

61

Digital Cameras good macro lens

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

62

Certification Stamps Buttons or Labels

Measurement forms

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

63

Event Limitation Stamps or Labels

Event inspection forms

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

64

You need tools and special knowledge to inspect

bull Dimensions of boat parts controlled by class rules

bull Weight of equipment andor crew

bull Compliance with AppG RRS

bull Compliance with Reg20

bull Actual dimensions of boat according to its rating certificate

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

65

Some Important Principleshellipbull If required by Class rules only certified equipment should be accepted for

inspection

bull ldquoEvent measurementrdquo is not ldquocertification measurementrdquo

bull Event Limitation Marks are not proof of compliance with Class rules

bull Equipment Inspectors should not inspect equipment that has been previously certified by themselves

bull Time and resources will never be enough for what we would like to achieve Be realistic and strike a balance between the ideal and the attainable

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

66

Sail inspection on tables

bull Table large enough for sailsbull Color-coded marks for main jib and

spinnakerbull ldquoautomatedrdquo table for large numbers

of sails (no folding necessary)

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

67

SAILS FLATTEN FLAKE DONrsquoT OVER-TENSION

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

68

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

69

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

70

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

71

ERS H21 If an equipment inspector is in any doubt as to the application of orcompliance with the class rules the question should be referred to the authorityresponsible for interpreting the class rules

REMEMBER If in doubthellip

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session

72

Next ndash Complete the Australian Sailing

Sails and Spars Practical Session